Micro-8051-Www ControlMakers Ir

‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮو ﻧﻮآوران ﮐﺎوش‬
‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺳﯿﻮن ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ‪ ،‬اﺟﺮای ﭘﺮوژهﻫﺎی اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ‬
‫آﻣﻮزش دورهﻫﺎی ﺗﺨﺼﺼﯽ اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮏ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﺻﻔﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻚﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻭ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻﭼﻴﺰ ﺟﺰ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺩﻳﺠﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻁ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﺒﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪+5V‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0V‬‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺒﻞ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟ ﭼﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ؟‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ ٣٦ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ ٠،١،٢،٣،٤،٥،٦،٧،٨،٩‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﺋﻴﻢ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡﮔﺬﺍﺭﻯ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﮔﻮﺋﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﻩ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (١٠‬ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ )‪(١٠‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬

‫‪Decimal‬‬ ‫‪Octal‬‬ ‫‪Binary‬‬ ‫‪Hexadecimal‬‬
‫ﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪110‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪111‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪1000‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪1001‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1010‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1011‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬

‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪1100‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1101‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪1110‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪1111‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬

‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪10000‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﻥﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 5D1A‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬

‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ 1H‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ‪ 8x51‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫)‪ (P3),(P2),(P1),(P0‬ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺸﺖ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ RAM‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ )‪ (+٥‬ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ‪ GND‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ‪ ٤‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ‪ ٣٢‬ﭘﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٤٠‬ﭘﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪: 89C51‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪:٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪P1‬‬
‫‪P1.7‬‬ ‫‪P1.6‬‬ ‫‪P1.5‬‬ ‫‪P1.4‬‬ ‫‪P1.3‬‬ ‫‪P1.2‬‬ ‫‪P1.1‬‬ ‫‪P1.0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪:١٧‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ P3‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪P3.7‬‬ ‫‪P3.6‬‬ ‫‪P3.5‬‬ ‫‪P3.4‬‬ ‫‪P3.3‬‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫‪P3.2‬‬ ‫‪P3.1‬‬ ‫‪P3.0‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺱﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪P3.0‬‬ ‫‪P3.1‬‬ ‫‪P3.2‬‬ ‫‪P3.3‬‬ ‫‪P3.4‬‬ ‫‪P3.5‬‬ ‫‪P3.6‬‬ ‫‪P3.7‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪RXD‬‬ ‫‪TXD‬‬ ‫‪INT0‬‬ ‫‪INT1‬‬ ‫‪T0‬‬ ‫‪T1‬‬ ‫‪WR‬‬ ‫‪RD‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ ٢١‬ﺗﺎ ‪:٢٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ P2‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪P2.7‬‬ ‫‪P2.6‬‬ ‫‪P2.5‬‬ ‫‪P2.4‬‬ ‫‪P2.3‬‬ ‫‪P2.2‬‬ ‫‪P2.1‬‬ ‫‪P2.0‬‬

‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪:٣٩‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ P0‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ ROM‬ﻭ‪RAM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﭘﻠﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ROM‬ﻭ‪RAM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻱ ‪ ALE‬ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪ LATCH‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫*ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ RAM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻟﺘﻲﭘﻠﻜﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ‪ VCC‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ)‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪ PULL UP‬ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻛﺶ ‪ ARRAY‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‪P0‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪P3.7‬‬ ‫‪P3.6‬‬ ‫‪P3.5‬‬ ‫‪P3.4‬‬ ‫‪P3.3‬‬ ‫‪P3.2‬‬ ‫‪P3.1‬‬ ‫‪P3.0‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬

‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ‪ ٣٢‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪:٩‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ Reset‬ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺭﮔﻮﻟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ reset‬ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Reset‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ Reset‬ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ R1‬ﻭ ‪ C1‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪C1 = 10µF‬‬
‫‪R1 = 8.2 KΩ‬‬
‫‪R2 = 100 Ω‬‬
‫ﻣﺪار ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯿﮑﺮوﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ را ‪ Reset‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ١٨‬ﻭ‪:١٩‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ CPU‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ١٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٩‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡﻫﺎﻱ ‪ XTAL1 , XTAL2‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ CPU-Clock‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ CPU‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﻭ ‪ ١٩‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥﺳﺎﺯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ‪24MHz‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ CPU‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 2MHz‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ CPU‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪1s‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ =‬
‫‪XTAL / 12‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪C 1 = C 2 = 30 pF ± % 10‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ دﺳﺘﻮری در ﯾﮏ ﺳﯿﮑﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ اﺟﺮا ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮد و ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮر‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﯿﮑﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪:٢٩‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ OE‬ﺍﺯ ‪ EEPROM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪:٣٠‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ :ALE‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﭘﻠﻜﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‪ ROM‬ﻭ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪RAM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪:٣١‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ‪ 89C51‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ EEPROM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ‪ VCC‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻭ‪:٤٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ VCC,GND‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻖ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻯ‪ ٨٠٥١‬ﻭ ‪:٨٠٥٢‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ROM‬‬ ‫‪ ROM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ROM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪8051‬‬ ‫‪128‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪4K‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪64K‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪8052‬‬ ‫‪256‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪8K‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪128K‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﻗﺴﻤﺖ‪ ROM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻯ ﺑﺮ‪RAM‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪RAM‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺑﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ RAM‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪RAM‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺩ( ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪7F‬‬ ‫‪FF‬‬
‫‪F0‬‬ ‫‪F7‬‬ ‫‪F6‬‬ ‫‪F5‬‬ ‫‪F4‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪F1‬‬ ‫‪F0‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ RAM‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪E0‬‬ ‫‪E7‬‬ ‫‪E6‬‬ ‫‪E5‬‬ ‫‪E4‬‬ ‫‪E3‬‬ ‫‪E2‬‬ ‫‪E1‬‬ ‫‪E0‬‬ ‫‪ACC‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪D0‬‬ ‫‪D7‬‬ ‫‪D6‬‬ ‫‪D5‬‬ ‫‪D4‬‬ ‫‪D3‬‬ ‫‪D2‬‬ ‫‪D1‬‬ ‫‪D0‬‬ ‫‪PSW‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪B8‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪BC‬‬ ‫‪BB‬‬ ‫‪BA‬‬ ‫‪B9‬‬ ‫‪B8‬‬ ‫‪IP‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪2F‬‬ ‫‪7F‬‬ ‫‪7E‬‬ ‫‪7D‬‬ ‫‪7C‬‬ ‫‪7B‬‬ ‫‪7A‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪2E‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪B0‬‬ ‫‪B7‬‬ ‫‪B6‬‬ ‫‪B5‬‬ ‫‪B4‬‬ ‫‪B3‬‬ ‫‪B2‬‬ ‫‪B1‬‬ ‫‪B0‬‬ ‫‪P3‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪2D‬‬ ‫‪6F‬‬ ‫‪6E‬‬ ‫‪6D‬‬ ‫‪6C‬‬ ‫‪6B‬‬ ‫‪6A‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬
‫‪2C‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪A8‬‬ ‫‪AF‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪AC‬‬ ‫‪AB‬‬ ‫‪AA‬‬ ‫‪A9‬‬ ‫‪A8‬‬ ‫‪IE‬‬
‫‪2B‬‬ ‫‪5F‬‬ ‫‪5E‬‬ ‫‪5D‬‬ ‫‪5C‬‬ ‫‪5B‬‬ ‫‪5A‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪2A‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪A0‬‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A4‬‬ ‫‪A3‬‬ ‫‪A2‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫‪A0‬‬ ‫‪P2‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪4F‬‬ ‫‪4E‬‬ ‫‪4D‬‬ ‫‪4C‬‬ ‫‪4B‬‬ ‫‪4A‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬
‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪SBUF‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪3F‬‬ ‫‪3E‬‬ ‫‪3D‬‬ ‫‪3C‬‬ ‫‪3B‬‬ ‫‪3A‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬ ‫‪9F‬‬ ‫‪9E‬‬ ‫‪9D‬‬ ‫‪9C‬‬ ‫‪9B‬‬ ‫‪9A‬‬ ‫‪99‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬ ‫‪SCON‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪2F‬‬ ‫‪2E‬‬ ‫‪2D‬‬ ‫‪2C‬‬ ‫‪2B‬‬ ‫‪2A‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪97‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪1F‬‬ ‫‪1E‬‬ ‫‪1D‬‬ ‫‪1C‬‬ ‫‪1B‬‬ ‫‪1A‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪8D‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TH1‬‬
‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8C‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TH0‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪0F‬‬ ‫‪0E‬‬ ‫‪0D‬‬ ‫‪0C‬‬ ‫‪0B‬‬ ‫‪0A‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪8B‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TL1‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫‪8A‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TL0‬‬
‫‪1F‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TMOD‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪8F‬‬ ‫‪8E‬‬ ‫‪8D‬‬ ‫‪8C‬‬ ‫‪8B‬‬ ‫‪8A‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪TCON‬‬
‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪PCON‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪0F‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪DPH‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ‪١‬‬
‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪DPL‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪R0-R7‬ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪00‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪P0‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺷﻪ ‪٨٠٥١‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻭ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ P1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ .(P1.0)P1‬ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ TMOD‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ‪ TMOD‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﮏﻫﺎﻯ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪ 00H‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1F H‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪۴‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ )ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻪ‪ (،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ‪ R0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ R7‬ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺩﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪RAM‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱﭘﺬﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪20H‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 2FH‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺱﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪RAM‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ 30H‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 2FH‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﻗﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻯ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪ 80H‬ﺗﺎ ‪ FFH‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ CPU‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺱﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪:‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ CPU‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪٨٠٥١‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪Assembler‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Assembler‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﺒﻠﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪ Assembly‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﹰﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ )‪ (Text Editor‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ NOTE PAD‬ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Dos‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Edit.exe‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﻫﻢﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ORG‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Assembler‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ EEPROM‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪ORG 0H‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪:1‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#55H‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ‪ ٥٥‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ P1‬ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#85D‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ‪ ٨٥‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ P1‬ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#01010011B‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ‪ ٠١٠١٠٠١١‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ P1‬ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ #‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪:2‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,55H‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ 55H‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪ P1‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪:3‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MOV A,P1‬‬
‫‪MOV P2,A‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ P1‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ P2‬ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺁﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪ P2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ B,D,H‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪B = Binary‬‬ ‫‪D = Decimal‬‬ ‫‪H = Hexadecimal‬‬

‫‪EQU‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﺒﻠﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :4‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪ 20H‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ MEMORY‬ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪MEMORY‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪20H‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻰ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪JMP‬‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ LJMP‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺵﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ SJMP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪:5‬‬
‫‪LOOP:‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪JMP LOOP‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ LOOP‬ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪LOOP:JMP LOOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪ CPU‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ JMP $‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ ASSEMBLER‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ END‬ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ORG 0‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#55H‬‬
‫‪LOOP: JMP LOOP‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﻭﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ‪ IC‬ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ LED‬ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻰﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ 89C51‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ P1 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ RAM‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ I/O‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ .(٨‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ‪ +5V‬ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪ GND‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 55H‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪55H = 010101010 B‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪LED‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ Active LoW‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪DJNZ COUNT,LOOP‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ EQU‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪COUNT‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ LOOP‬ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻮﭖ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪:(٢‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪COUNT EQU 30H‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ORG 00H‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪MOV COUNT,#200‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#01010101B‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪LOOP: DJNZ COUNT,LOOP‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#10101010B‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪MOV COUNT,#250‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪LOOP1:DJNZ COUNT,LOOP‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪JMP MAIN‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ 55H‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 400µs‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪AAH‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 501µs‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ 55H‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﭼﻪ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ DJNZ‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﻢ ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ 400µs‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ MOV‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ ٢*٢٥٠+١‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥﺳﺎﺯ ‪ 12MHz‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﻴﻠﻮﺳﻜﻮﭖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ‪LED‬ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻄﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪X = LOOP1 = 2*255‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪Z = 10 * Y‬‬
‫‪Y = LOOP2 = 255*X‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪Z = LOOP3 = 10*Y‬‬ ‫‪Y = 255 * X‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬ ‫‪X = 2*255‬‬
‫‪Z = 10 * (255 * (2 * 255)) = 1300500‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ DJNZ‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭼﺸﻢﭘﻮﺷﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(٣‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪LED‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪COUNT1 EQU 20H‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#0FFH‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ‪ LED‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ P1‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪LED‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪CALL DELAY‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#0H‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪LED‬ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ‪MAIN‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪DELAY:‬‬
‫‪MOV COUNT2,#255‬‬
‫‪LOOP3:‬‬
‫‪LOOP2:‬‬
‫‪LOOP1: DJNZ COUNT1,LOOP1‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪DJNZ COUNT2,LOOP2‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪DJNZ COUNT3,LOOP3‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪:CALL‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ‪ DELAY‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ CALL‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ CPU ، DELAY‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ DELAY‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ RET‬ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ RET‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ DELAY ،‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪ CALL‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪TIMER‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻫﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺘﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ ‪ 8051‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪SETB‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪SETB P1.0‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ P1‬ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪CLR‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪CLR P0.5‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ P0‬ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪P0‬‬
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬
‫‪D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0‬‬
‫‪JNB‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪JB‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪JNB P1.2,LOOP‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ P1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ‪ GND‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ LOOP‬ﭘﺮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(٤‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ P3.3‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 55H‬ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ P1‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪P3.5‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ AAH‬ﺭﻭﻱ‪ P1‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ORG 00H‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪SCAN:‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪JNB‬‬ ‫‪P3.3,NUM1‬‬
‫‪JNB‬‬ ‫‪P3.5,NUM2‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪JMP SCAN‬‬
‫‪NUM1:‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪P1,#55H‬‬
‫‪JMP‬‬ ‫‪SCAN‬‬
‫‪NUM2:‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪P1,#0AAH‬‬
‫‪JMP‬‬ ‫‪SCAN‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪TIMER‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪ 89C51‬ﺩﻭ ‪ TIMER‬ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺳﻴﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ THX‬ﻭ ‪ TLX‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪TH‬‬ ‫‪TL‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ 89C51‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪ TMOD‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪TIMER 1‬‬ ‫‪TIMER 0‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪GATE‬‬ ‫‪CT‬‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪M0‬‬ ‫‪GATE‬‬ ‫‪CT‬‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪MO‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ M0‬ﻭ ‪ M1‬ﺩﺭ ‪ ، Tmod‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪M0‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪ ١٣‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ ١٦‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ (THX ,TLX‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪٢١٣ = ٨١٩٢‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﯾﮏ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ )‪ ١٦‬ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ (THX,TLX‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ TIMER‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪= ٦٥٥٣٥‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٦‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دو‪:‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ BACKUP‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ٢٨ = ٢٥٥‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺮﭼﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪TFx‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ TRx‬ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪:CT‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﻟﺴﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﺋﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﻭﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ)ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ 12MHZ‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻟﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻟﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﺋﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ T0‬ﻭ‪ T1‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪:GATE‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ TR‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ TR‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ INT‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ )‪ TR‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ (INT‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪STOP‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻰﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ‪ TMOD‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪) MOV‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪TMOD,#10H‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪TH X , TL X‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪) Mov‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪TH1,#6CH‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪Mov‬‬ ‫‪TL1,#0C0H‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪SETB TR X‬‬
‫‪) SETB‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪TR1‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ TFX‬ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪)LOOP: JNB‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪TF1,LOOP‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪TFX‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪) CLR‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪TF1‬‬

‫‪ -٦‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪TR X‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪)CLR‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪TR1‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪DELAY:‬‬
‫‪MOV TMOD,#01H‬‬
‫‪MOV TH0,#3CH‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ‪ TIMER0‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3CB0H‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 15536‬ﺩﺳﻴﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫‪MOV TL0,#0B0H‬‬
‫‪SETB TR0‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪ Timer0‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪LOOP:JNB TF0,LOOP‬‬
‫‪CLR TF0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪CLR TR0‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ CALL‬ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ 50ms‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ‪ TMOD‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪TIMER 1‬‬ ‫‪TIMER 0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪GATE‬‬ ‫‪CT‬‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪M0‬‬ ‫‪GATE‬‬ ‫‪CT‬‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪MO‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ TIMER0‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪TR‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ( ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪٦٥٥٣٦‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ‪ 50ms‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ TL0‬ﻭ ‪TH0‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ( ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠٠٠‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ ‪ ٥٠٠٠٠‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ 12MHz‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﭘﺲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪65536 – 50000 = 15536‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ TH0‬ﻭ ‪ TL0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ١٥٥٣٦‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ‪ ٦٥٥٣٦‬ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪ TF٠‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﹰﺎ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪ TF٠‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3C‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ TH0‬ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ B0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ TL0‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3CB0‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪15536‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﻴﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ TR0‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻛﺸﻲ ‪ TF0‬ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ TF0‬ﺷﺪﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ CPU‬ﻳﻚ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﹰﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ TF0‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ TF0‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ DELAY‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ RET‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٦٥‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ‪DJNZ‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(٥‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﹰﺎ ‪ LED‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MAIN LOOP‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#0H‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪DELAY:‬‬
‫‪MOV R0,#20‬‬
‫‪DELAY LOOP:‬‬
‫‪MOV TH0,#0B0H‬‬
‫‪SETB TR0‬‬ ‫‪X = 50 ms‬‬
‫‪Y = 20 * X‬‬
‫‪Y = 20 * 50 ms = 1000ms‬‬
‫‪=1s‬‬
‫‪LOOP: JNB TF0,LOOP‬‬

‫‪CLR TF0‬‬
‫‪CLR TR0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪DJNZ R0,DELAYLOOP‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ اﺟﺮای ﭘﺮوژهﻫﺎی اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ‬،‫ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ‬
:(٦) ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻗﺺ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ‬
ORG 0
r
MAIN:
.i
MOV P1,#55H
CALL DELAY
s
MOV P1,#0AAH
r
CALL DELAY
JMP MAIN
e
k
DELAY:
MOV R1,#255
a
MOV R2,#10
LOOP2:
lM
LOOP1:
MOV R0,#255
LOOP0:DJNZ R0,LOOP0
DJNZ R1,LOOP1
o
DJNZ R2,LOOP2
tr
RET
END
n
o
.C
w
w
w
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(٧‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﺺ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪MOD1:‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ‪LED‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ‪ LED‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪MOV R0,#8‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪MOV A,#01H‬‬
‫‪LOOPMOD1:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪RR A‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪DJNZ R0,LOOPMOD1‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪MOD2:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪ LED‬ﺩﺭ ‪ MOD1‬ﻫﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪MOV R0,#7‬‬
‫‪LOOPMOD2:‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪RL A‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪DJNZ R0,LOOPMOD2‬‬
‫‪MODONOFF:‬‬
‫‪MOV R0,#5‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪CLR A‬‬
‫‪LOOPMODONOFF:‬‬
‫‪CPL A‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪DJNZ R0,LOOPMODONOFF‬‬
‫‪MOD3:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ MOD1‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ‪ LED‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺸﺖ ‪ LED‬ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MOV R0,#8‬‬
MOV A,#0FEH
LOOPMOD3:
RR A
MOV P1,A
r
CALL DELAY
DJNZ R0,LOOPMOD3
.i
s
MOD4:
.‫ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬LED ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﻳﻚ‬
r
MOV R0,#8
e
LOOPMOD4:
k
MOV P1,A
CALL DELAY
a
RL A
DJNZ R0,LOOPMOD4
lM
CALL DELAY
MODCPL:
o
.‫ﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‬LED ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣُﺪ‬
tr
MOV R0,#8
MOV A,#55H
LOOPMODCPL:
n
CPL A
MOV P1,A
o
CALL DELAY
.C
DJNZ R0,LOOPMODCPL
JMP MAIN
w
w
;+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
w
; DELAY One Second Mili SECOND

DELAY:
MOV R7,#4
LDK:
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬٢٠٠ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬
MOV TH0,#3CH
MOV TL0,#0B0H
MOV TMOD,#01H
SETB TR0
‫‪LOOPDELAY:JNB TF0,LOOPDELAY‬‬
‫‪CLR TR0‬‬
‫‪CLR TF0‬‬
‫‪DJNZ R7,LDK‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LED‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻭﻟﺮ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ P3.3‬ﻭ ‪ P3.5‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(٨‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ LED‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪JNB P3.0,MENU1‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪JNB P3.5,MENU2‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪MENU1:‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#55H‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪MENU2:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#0AAH‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪:KEYBOARD‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺴﻲ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﺩﻩ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ -٨‬ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ -٩‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -١٠‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -١١‬ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -١٢‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫‪ -١٣‬ﺑﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺮﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﺑﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪:(٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ EQU‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ROW1‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.7‬‬
‫‪ROW2‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.6‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ROW3‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.5‬‬
‫‪ROW4‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.4‬‬
‫‪COL1‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.3‬‬
‫‪COL2‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.2‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪COL3‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.1‬‬

‫‪KEYBUF‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪30H‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ‪KEYBUF‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪CALLKEYSCAN‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,KEYBUF‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪KEYSCAN:‬‬
‫‪CLR ROW1‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪JNB COL1,KEY1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪SETB ROW1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫‪CLR ROW2‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ‬

JNB COL1,KEY4
r
.‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
JNB COL2,KEY5
.i
JNB COL3,KEY6
SETB ROW2
s
CLR ROW3
r
JNB COL1,KEY7
e
JNB COL2,KEY8
JNB COL3,KEY9
k
SETB ROW3
CLR ROW4
a
JNB COL3,KEYNUMBER
lM
JNB COL2,KEY0
JNB COL1,KEYSTAR
JMP KEYSCAN
KEY1:
o
MOV KEYBUF,#01H
RET
tr
KEY2:
MOV KEYBUF,#02H
n
RET
KEY3:
o
MOV KEYBUF,#03H
RET
.C
KEY4:
MOV KEYBUF,#04H
RET
w
KEY5:
MOV KEYBUF,#05H
w
RET
KEY6:
MOV KEYBUF,#06H
w
RET
KEY7:
MOV KEYBUF,#07H
RET
KEY8:
MOV KEYBUF,#08H
RET
KEY9:
MOV KEYBUF,#09H
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪KEY0:‬‬
‫‪MOV KEYBUF,#0H‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪KEYSTAR:‬‬
‫‪MOV KEYBUF,#0AAH‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪KEYNUMBER:‬‬
‫‪MOV KEYBUF,#55H‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪) Stepper motor‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻢﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﺑﻪﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺶ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‪VCC‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ Not‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺲ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﻠﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺳﻴﻢﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ VCC‬ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻴﻢﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻢﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ‪B‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ‪D‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١١‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﹰﺎ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪MOV A,#66H‬‬
‫‪BACK:‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪RR‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪P1,A‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪JNB‬‬ ‫‪P3.5,LEFT‬‬
‫‪JMP‬‬ ‫‪BACK‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪DELAY:‬‬
‫‪MOV R7,#4‬‬
‫‪LDK:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪CLR TR0‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪CLR TF0‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١١‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪ P3.3‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖﮔﺮﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪P3.5‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭼﭙﮕﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ORG 00H‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪KEYSCAN:‬‬
‫‪JNB P3.3,RIGHT‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪JNB P3.5,LEFT‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪JMP KEYSCAN‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪RIGHT:‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪A,#66H‬‬
‫‪BACK:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪RR‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪P1,A‬‬
‫‪CALL‬‬ ‫‪DELAY‬‬
‫‪JNB‬‬ ‫‪P3.5,LEFT‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪LEFT:‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪A,#66H‬‬
‫‪BACK:‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪RL‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪P1,A‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪CALL‬‬ ‫‪DELAY‬‬
‫‪JNB‬‬ ‫‪P3.3,RIGHT‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪DELAY:‬‬
‫‪MOV R7,#4‬‬
‫‪LDK:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪CLR TR0‬‬
‫‪CLR TF0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪7SEGMENT‬‬
‫‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﻔﺖ ‪ LED‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪LED‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪a, f, g, c, d‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ‪7segment‬ﻫﺎ ﺁﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺗﺪ ‪ LED‬ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ segment‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ‪ 7segment‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ‪ BCD‬ﺑﻪ ‪7segment‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ BCD‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ P2‬ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪IC‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ 7447‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﭘﻠﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻼ ‪ a1‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﺑﻪ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ a2‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ‪ a3‬ﻭ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺁﻧﺪ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ‪segment٧‬ﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺁﻧﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺁﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ P1.4‬ﻭ ‪ P1.5‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 15H‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ P1‬ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﺪ ‪ 7segment‬ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١٢‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#13H‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪LOOP:JMP LOOP‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪ :(١٣‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ٤‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#24H‬‬
‫‪LOOP: JMP LOOP‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪ :(١٤‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 34‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#13H‬‬
‫‪NOP‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#24H‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﹶﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪٣‬ﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 34‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻚﺗﻚ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪SHOW:‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪MOV A,VALUE‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪MOV B,10‬‬
‫‪DIV‬‬ ‫‪AB‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ADD‬‬ ‫‪A,#10H‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ADD B,#20H‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,B‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪JMP SHOW‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻭﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ .CPU‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ cpu‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ 89C51‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ Timer0‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Timer1‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪) External0‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪١٢‬‬
‫‪) External1‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪١٣‬‬

‫‪ Serial‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ‪ CPU‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ RETI‬ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ‪ CPU ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ CPU ، RETI‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪IE‬‬
‫‪EA‬‬ ‫‪NU‬‬ ‫‪ET2‬‬ ‫‪ES‬‬ ‫‪ET1‬‬ ‫‪EX1‬‬ ‫‪ET0‬‬ ‫‪EX0‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯ‬
‫‪2BH‬‬
‫‪1BH‬‬
‫‪0BH‬‬
‫‪23H‬‬
‫‪13H‬‬
‫‪03H‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪١‬‬
‫‪89C52‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ IE‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ EA‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﭼﻪ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ‪ IE‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪IE‬‬
‫‪EA‬‬ ‫‪NU‬‬ ‫‪ET2‬‬ ‫‪ES‬‬ ‫‪ET1‬‬ ‫‪EX1‬‬ ‫‪ET0‬‬ ‫‪EX0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪MOV IE,#81H‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪١٢‬ﻭ‪ ١٣‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ‪ IE‬ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪١٢‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ١٣‬ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١٥‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ ١٢‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪ORG 0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ORG 03H‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪INTEXTERNAL:‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,#00H‬‬
‫‪RETI‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪SETB IT0‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪SJMP $‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ‪ MAIN‬ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪ 3H‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺵ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ‪ MAIN‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪IT0‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ‪ IT0‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻔﺮ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ ١٣‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وارد ﺷﺪن وﻗﻔﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ‬

‫وارد ﺷﺪن وﻗﻔﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ IT0‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ IT=0‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ IT=1‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ LED‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻯ‪:‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ‪ IE‬ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ) ‪ .( TF=1‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪ TF‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١٦‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ‪ 8KHz‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ P1.6‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ORG 0H‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ORG 0BH‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪CPL P1.6‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪RETI‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪MOV TH0,#62‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪SJMP $‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ‪ MAIN‬ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ )‪ (IE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ٨٢‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ‪ EA‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪125 µs‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ‪ 8KHz‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪62 µs‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ = 1000000/8000‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪ = 125 µs/ 2 = 62.5 ~ 62 µs‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ SEG1‬ﻭ‪ SEG2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪7SEGMENT‬ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪SEG1‬‬ ‫‪EQU 30H‬‬

‫‪SEG2‬‬ ‫‪EQU 31H‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ORG 0H‬‬
‫‪ORG 0BH‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪CLR TR0‬‬
‫‪MOV TH0,#0ECH‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MOV TL0,#078H‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,SEG1‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪SETB P1.4‬‬
‫‪CLR P1.4‬‬
‫‪MOV P1,SEG2‬‬
‫‪SETB P1.4‬‬
‫‪CLR P1.4‬‬
‫‪RETI‬‬
MAIN:
MOV IE,#82H
MOV TMOD,#11H
r
MOV TH0,#0ECH
MOV TL0,#78H
.i
SETB TR0
s
SJMP $
r
DELAY:
e
MOV TH1,#0FCH
MOV TL1,#18H
k
SETB TR1
LOOPDELAY:JNB TF1,LOOPDELAY
a
CLR TR1
lM
CLR TF1
RET
END
o
tr
n
o
.C
w
w
w
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻨﻰ )‪:(١٨‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ١٥‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ‪7KH‬ﻭ ‪ 500H‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ORG‬‬ ‫‪00H‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪JMP‬‬ ‫‪MAIN‬‬
‫‪ORG‬‬ ‫‪0BH‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪JMP‬‬ ‫‪TS0‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ORG‬‬ ‫‪1BH‬‬
‫‪JMP‬‬ ‫‪TS1‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪TMOD,#12H‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪TH0,#-71‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪SETB‬‬ ‫‪TR0‬‬
‫‪SETB‬‬ ‫‪TF1‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪IE,#8AH‬‬
‫‪SJMP‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪TS0:‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪CPL P1.7‬‬
‫‪RETI‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪TS1:‬‬
‫‪CLR‬‬ ‫‪TR1‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫)‪TH1,#HIGH(-1000‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫)‪TL1,#LOW(-1000‬‬
‫‪SETB‬‬ ‫‪TR1‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪CPL‬‬ ‫‪P1.6‬‬
‫‪RETI‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ 1KHZ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ‪ 7KHZ‬ﺍﺯﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ‪ 500HZ‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ‪،‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪ IE‬ﻭ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ 7KHZ‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ 500HZ‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪ 1BH‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻭﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ TF=1‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ MAIN‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ TF1=1‬ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ 1BH‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ‪500HZ‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ 7KHZ‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫)‪(MSB‬‬ ‫)‪(LSB‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪PT2‬‬ ‫‪PS‬‬ ‫‪PT1‬‬ ‫‪PX1‬‬ ‫‪PTO‬‬ ‫‪PXO‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬

‫ﺭﺯﺭﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪IP.7‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﺯﺭﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪IP.6‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪّﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ 2‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪IP.5‬‬ ‫‪PT2‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ PT2 = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪IP.4‬‬ ‫‪PS‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ PS = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪IP.3‬‬ ‫‪PT1‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ PT1 = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪IP.1‬‬ ‫‪PT0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ PT0 = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 0‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪IP.0‬‬ ‫‪PX0‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ PX0 = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ‪ MCS – 51‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ RETI‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ IE‬ﻳﺎ ‪ IP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻲﻧﻈﻤﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲﺩﻫﻲ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 8051‬ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ( ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ ٩‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻯ ﻭ ﭘﺎﮎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺗﺮﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ( ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ )ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﻪﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ ،8051‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ INT0‬ﻭ ‪ INT1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ IT0‬ﻭ ‪ IT1‬ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ TCON‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﭼﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ TF0‬ﻭ ‪ TF1‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻳﻚﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ TF0 ،‬ﻭ ‪ TF1‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ RI‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ،TI‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‪ RI ،‬ﻭ ‪ TI‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪SMO SM1 SM2 REN‬‬ ‫‪TB8‬‬ ‫‪RB8‬‬ ‫‪TI‬‬ ‫‪RI‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪SM0‬‬ ‫‪SM1‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻪ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪:SM0,‬‬ ‫‪SM1‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ‪RXD‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ(‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻢ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﺵﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺍﺯﺩﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻴﻼﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪TXD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ TXD‬ﻭ ‪ RXD‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ 3‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ REN‬ﻭ ‪ RI‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪ SCON‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 0‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﯾﮏ‪:‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ‪TXD‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ‪ RXD‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ )ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ )ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺭﺯﺵﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،(.‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪ SBUF‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻧﺮﺥ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دو‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ١١‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ TB8‬ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪ SCON‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ TB8‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪RB8‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪ SCON‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪ ٨‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺼﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺳﻴﻼﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪) SMOD‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ( ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪ PCON‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ SMOD‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ 1/32 ،‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ 1/64 ،‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺳﻴﻼﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 2 ،1‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ‪ REN‬ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪ SCON‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ‪ RXD‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ‪ SBUF‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎی ﯾﮏ و ﺳﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮخ ارﺳﺎل و درﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ TIMER‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ‪ TIMER1‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دو اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد )‪ (8 bit auto reload‬در اﯾﻦ دو ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮخ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ارﺳﺎل و درﯾﺎﻓﺖ از ﺷﮑﻞ زﯾﺮ ﭘﯿﺮوی ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ )ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥﺳﺎﺯ( ‪ 11.0592MHz‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭ ‪ ٢٨٨٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ TIMER1‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪Baud Rate‬‬

‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪14400‬‬
‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪9600‬‬
‫‪-6‬‬ ‫‪4800‬‬
‫‪-12‬‬ ‫‪2400‬‬
‫‪-24‬‬ ‫‪1200‬‬
‫‪-48‬‬ ‫‪600‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪:SM2‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻳﺰﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ‪ SM2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ REN‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ RXD‬ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ 8051‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪:RB8‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪:TB8‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ‪ SBUFER‬ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ P‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻬﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ‪ RS232‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻳﻚ ‪ +5‬ﻭ ﺻﻔﺮ ‪ GND‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ -15 ، RS232‬ﺗﺎ ‪ -3‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ‪ +15‬ﺗﺎ ‪ +3‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﻪ ‪ RS232‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ‪ Max232‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ 89C51‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ SCON‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ TMOD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪١‬ﻭ‪٣‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ TIMER1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪٣‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪SBUF‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺳﺮﻛﺸﻲ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ TI‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻛﺸﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ TI‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪TI‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(١٩‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ ‪ 9600bps‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪MOV SCON,#01010000B‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MOV TH1,# -3‬‬

‫‪NEXT:‬‬
‫‪MOV A,P2‬‬
‫‪MOV SBUF,A‬‬
‫‪LOOP:JNB TI,LOOP‬‬
‫‪CLR TI‬‬
‫‪JMP NEXT‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ SCON‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ TMOD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪١‬ﻭ‪٣‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ TIMER1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪٣‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪SBUF‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺳﺮﻛﺸﻲ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ RI‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻛﺸﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ RI‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪RI‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪SBUF‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪:(٢٠‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ ‪ 9600bps‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪MAIN:‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MOV SCON,#01010000B‬‬
‫‪MOV TH1,#-3 ;IF XTALL CHANG TO 11.0592 SET BAUD RATE‬‬ ‫‪-3=9600|-6=4800|-‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪12=2400|-24=1200 ......‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪RESEVER:‬‬
‫‪LOOP:JNB RI,LOOP‬‬
‫‪MOV A,SBUF‬‬
‫‪CLR RI‬‬
‫‪JMP RESEVER‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ )‪ (LCD‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ 7SEGMENT‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ‪ LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ‪:LCD‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪VSS‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪VCC‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪VEE‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬

‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪RS‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬

‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪R/W‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB0‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬

‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB2‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB3‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB4‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB6‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪I/O‬‬ ‫‪DB7‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪VSS‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ‪10 OHM‬ﺑﻪ‪VCC‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪VCC‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪:RS‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﻭ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ RS=0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ RS=1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪:R/W‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ‪ R/W=1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪:E‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﭻ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﭻ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪:LCD‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ LCD(١‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ LCD‬ﺁﻥﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ COMMAND‬ﻭﻳﻚ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ DATA‬ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ DATA‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪RS = 1 :‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺏ‪R/W = 0 :‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ E‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ‪ HIGH‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ‪ LOW‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ DATA‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪RS = 0 :‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﺏ‪R/W = 0 :‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ :‬ﻭﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ E‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺶ ‪ HIGH‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ‪ LOW‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ ( ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ LCD‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ R/W = 1‬ﻭ‪ RS = 1‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ )‪ ( D7‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ D7 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪READY:‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪SETB D7‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪CLR‬‬ ‫‪RS‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪SETB R/W‬‬
‫‪BACK:‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪CLR‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪SETB E‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪JB‬‬ ‫‪D7,BACK‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪ ( ٤‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ COMMAND‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪COMMAND‬ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ COMMAND‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺪ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪C‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪14‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪18‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪1C‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪C0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻲ ‪٢‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺲ ‪٧*٥‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫)‪:(٢١‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ NO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪PORTLCD‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P0‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪RS‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.5‬‬

‫‪R/W‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.6‬‬
‫‪EN‬‬ ‫‪EQU‬‬ ‫‪P2.7‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪ORG 00H‬‬
‫‪MOV A,#38H‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪CALL COMMAND‬‬
‫‪MOV A,#0E‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪MOV A,#01H‬‬
‫‪MOV A,#06H‬‬
‫‪MOV A,#89H‬‬
MOV A,#’ N ’
CALL DAT
MOV A,#’ O ’
r
CALL DAT
.i
SJMP $
s
COMMAND:
r
MOV PORTLCD,A
e
CALL DELAY
k
CLR RS
CLR R/W
a
SETB EN
lM
CLR EN
RET
DAT:
o
MOV PORTLCD,A
tr
CALL DELAY
SETB RS
n
CLR R/W
SETB EN
o
CLR EN
.C
RET
DELAY:
w
MOV R0,#50
K1:MOV R1,#255
w
K2:DJNZ R1,K2
DJNZ R0,K1
w
RET
END
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪١‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻠﻪﺍﻱ ‪ ١/٨‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

BUSER EQU P2.0

ROW1 EQU P2.7
r
ROW2 EQU P2.6
.i
ROW3 EQU P2.5
ROW4 EQU P2.4
s
COL1 EQU P2.3
COL2 EQU P2.2
r
COL3 EQU P2.1
e
STEPPERPORT EQU P0
k
DELAYCOUNTER EQU 19H
NUMBERLOAD EQU 20H
a
TEMPKEYSCAN EQU 21H
DAHGANKEYSCAN EQU 22H
lM
NUMBERDISPLAY EQU 23H
SEGMENT1 EQU 24H
SEGMENT2 EQU 25H
TEMPDOR EQU 26H
o
DORNUMBER EQU 27H

tr
SPEEDNUMBER EQU 28H

n
ORG 0
JMP MAIN
o
ORG 1BH
.C
INTERRUPTTIMER1:
MOV TH1,#HIGH(64000)
MOV TL1,#LOW(64000)
w
CLR TF1
MOV P1,SEGMENT1
CALL DELAYDISPLAY
w
MOV P1,SEGMENT2
CALL DELAYDISPLAY
w
MOV P1,#0FFH
RETI
MAIN:
MOV TMOD,#11H
MOV IE,#88H
MOV SP,#50H
MOV TH1,#HIGH(64000)
MOV TL1,#LOW(64000)
SETB TR1
MOV NUMBERDISPLAY,#0H
CALL DISPLAY
LOOPMAIN:
r
CALL KEYSCAN
.i
MOV DORNUMBER,NUMBERLOAD
s
CALL DELAY
MOV NUMBERDISPLAY,#0
r
CALL DISPLAY
e
k
CALL KEYSCAN
MOV SPEEDNUMBER,NUMBERLOAD
a
SCANLEFTRIGHT:
lM
CLR ROW4
JNB COL3,RIGHT
JNB COL1,LEFT
JMP SCANLEFTRIGHT
o
tr
;++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
+
n
; --------------------RIGHT
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
o
RIGHT:
.C
MOV TEMPDOR,#50
MOV NUMBERDISPLAY,DORNUMBER
CALL DISPLAY
w
LOOPRIGHT:
MOV STEPPERPORT,#00001001B
CALL SPEED
w
CALL SPEED
w
CALL SPEED
CALL SPEED
DJNZ TEMPDOR,LOOPRIGHT
DJNZ DORNUMBER,RIGHT
CALL DISPLAY
CLR BUSER
CALL DELAY
SETB BUSER
JMP LOOPMAIN
;++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
r
+
; ----------------LEFT
.i
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
s
LEFT:
r
MOV TEMPDOR,#50
e
CALL DISPLAY
k
LOOPLEFT:
a
CALL SPEED
lM
CALL SPEED
CALL SPEED
o
CALL SPEED
tr
DJNZ TEMPDOR,LOOPLEFT
DJNZ DORNUMBER,LEFT
n
CALL DISPLAY
CLR BUSER
o
CALL DELAY
.C
SETB BUSER
JMP LOOPMAIN
;
w
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
+++++
; ----------------SPEED
w
.‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬

SPEED:
w
MOV R6,SPEEDNUMBER
LOOPSPEED:
MOV TH0,#0FCH
MOV TL0,#18H
SETB TR0
LOOP1S:JNB TF0,LOOP1S
CLR TR0
CLR TF0
; ------------STOP TEST
CLR ROW4
;JNB COL2,PAUSE
SETB ROW4
; -------------------------------
r
DJNZ R6,LOOPSPEED
RET
.i
s
; ---------SCAN KEYBOARD ------------
KEYSCAN:
r
SETB ROW4
e
CLR ROW1
JNB COL1,KEY1
k
JNB COL2,KEY2
JNB COL3,KEY3
a
SETB ROW1
lM
CLR ROW2
JNB COL1,KEY4
JNB COL2,KEY5
o
JNB COL3,KEY6
SETB ROW2
tr
CLR ROW3
n
JNB COL1,KEY7
JNB COL2,KEY8
o
JNB COL3,KEY9
SETB ROW3
.C
CLR ROW4
JNB COL2,KEYZERO
w
SETB ROW4
JMP KEYSCAN
w
; ---------FIND KEYBOARD PERESS ------------

KEY1:
w
SETB ROW1
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#1
JMP KEYLOAD
KEY2:
SETB ROW1
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#2
JMP KEYLOAD
KEY3:
SETB ROW1
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#3
JMP KEYLOAD
r
KEY4:
.i
SETB ROW2
s
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#4
JMP KEYLOAD
r
e
KEY5:
SETB ROW2
k
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#5
JMP KEYLOAD
a
lM
KEY6:
SETB ROW2
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#6
JMP KEYLOAD
o
KEY7:
tr
SETB ROW3
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#7
n
JMP KEYLOAD
o
KEY8:
SETB ROW3
.C
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#8
JMP KEYLOAD
w
KEY9:
SETB ROW3
w
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#9
JMP KEYLOAD
w
KEYZERO:
SETB ROW4
MOV TEMPKEYSCAN,#0
JMP KEYLOAD
; ------ MERG FIRST NUMBER & SECOND ------------
‫ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‬7seg ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
KEYLOAD:
JNB 07H,DAHGAN
MOV A,TEMPKEYSCAN
MOV B,DAHGANKEYSCAN
ADD A,B
MOV NUMBERLOAD,A
r
MOV NUMBERDISPLAY,A
CALL DISPLAY
.i
CALL DELAY
s
CLR 07H
RET
r
e
DAHGAN:
MOV A,TEMPKEYSCAN
k
MOV B,#10
MUL AB
a
MOV DAHGANKEYSCAN,A
lM
SETB 07H
MOV NUMBERDISPLAY,A
CALL DISPLAY
CALL DELAY
o
JMP KEYSCAN
tr
DELAYDISPLAY:
n
MOV R7,#255
LOOPDISPLAY:
o
DJNZ R7,LOOPDISPLAY
RET
.C
; ---------SPELLET ONE NUMBER TO 2 DIGIT ------------

DISPLAY:
w
MOV A,NUMBERDISPLAY
MOV B,#10
w
DIV AB
ORL B,#10H
ORL A,#20H
w
MOV SEGMENT1,B
MOV SEGMENT2,A
RET
; ---------DELAY 50 MIL SECOND -----------

DELAY:
MOV DELAYCOUNTER,#10
LDK:
MOV TH0,#3CH
‫‪CLR TR0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪CLR‬‬
‫‪TF0‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪DJN‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪DEL‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪AYC‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪OUN‬‬
‫‪TER,‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪LDK‬‬
‫‪RET‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴ‬
‫ﻙ ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷ‬
‫ﻱ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪7F‬‬ ‫‪FF‬‬
‫‪F0‬‬ ‫‪F7‬‬ ‫‪F6‬‬ ‫‪F5‬‬ ‫‪F4‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪F1‬‬ ‫‪F0‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪E0‬‬ ‫‪E7‬‬ ‫‪E6‬‬ ‫‪E5‬‬ ‫‪E4‬‬ ‫‪E3‬‬ ‫‪E2‬‬ ‫‪E1‬‬ ‫‪E0‬‬ ‫‪ACC‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ‪RAM‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪D0‬‬ ‫‪D7‬‬ ‫‪D6‬‬ ‫‪D5‬‬ ‫‪D4‬‬ ‫‪D3‬‬ ‫‪D2‬‬ ‫‪D1‬‬ ‫‪D0‬‬ ‫‪PSW‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪B8‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪BC‬‬ ‫‪BB‬‬ ‫‪BA‬‬ ‫‪B9‬‬ ‫‪B8‬‬ ‫‪IP‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪2F‬‬ ‫‪7F‬‬ ‫‪7E‬‬ ‫‪7D‬‬ ‫‪7C‬‬ ‫‪7B‬‬ ‫‪7A‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪2E‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪B0‬‬ ‫‪B7‬‬ ‫‪B6‬‬ ‫‪B5‬‬ ‫‪B4‬‬ ‫‪B3‬‬ ‫‪B2‬‬ ‫‪B1‬‬ ‫‪B0‬‬ ‫‪P3‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪2D‬‬ ‫‪6F‬‬ ‫‪6E‬‬ ‫‪6D‬‬ ‫‪6C‬‬ ‫‪6B‬‬ ‫‪6A‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪2C‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪A8‬‬ ‫‪AF‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪----‬‬ ‫‪AC‬‬ ‫‪AB‬‬ ‫‪AA‬‬ ‫‪A9‬‬ ‫‪A8‬‬ ‫‪IE‬‬
‫‪2B‬‬ ‫‪5F‬‬ ‫‪5E‬‬ ‫‪5D‬‬ ‫‪5C‬‬ ‫‪5B‬‬ ‫‪5A‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬
‫‪2A‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪A0‬‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A4‬‬ ‫‪A3‬‬ ‫‪A2‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫‪A0‬‬ ‫‪P2‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪4F‬‬ ‫‪4E‬‬ ‫‪4D‬‬ ‫‪4C‬‬ ‫‪4B‬‬ ‫‪4A‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬

‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪SBUF‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪3F‬‬ ‫‪3E‬‬ ‫‪3D‬‬ ‫‪3C‬‬ ‫‪3B‬‬ ‫‪3A‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬ ‫‪9F‬‬ ‫‪9E‬‬ ‫‪9D‬‬ ‫‪9C‬‬ ‫‪9B‬‬ ‫‪9A‬‬ ‫‪99‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬ ‫‪SCON‬‬
‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪2F‬‬ ‫‪2E‬‬ ‫‪2D‬‬ ‫‪2C‬‬ ‫‪2B‬‬ ‫‪2A‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪97‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪1F‬‬ ‫‪1E‬‬ ‫‪1D‬‬ ‫‪1C‬‬ ‫‪1B‬‬ ‫‪1A‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪8D‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TH1‬‬
‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8C‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TH0‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪0F‬‬ ‫‪0E‬‬ ‫‪0D‬‬ ‫‪0C‬‬ ‫‪0B‬‬ ‫‪0A‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪8B‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TL1‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫‪8A‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TL0‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪1F‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TMOD‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪8F‬‬ ‫‪8E‬‬ ‫‪8D‬‬ ‫‪8C‬‬ ‫‪8B‬‬ ‫‪8A‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪TCON‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪PCON‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪0F‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪DPH‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ‪١‬‬
‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪DPL‬‬
‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪R0-R7‬ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪00‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪P0‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺷﻪ ‪٨٠٥١‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪89C51‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪D7H‬‬ ‫‪PSW.7‬‬ ‫‪CY‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪D6H‬‬ ‫‪PSW.6‬‬ ‫‪AC‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪D5H‬‬ ‫‪PSW.5‬‬ ‫‪F0‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ‪١‬‬ ‫‪D4H‬‬ ‫‪PSW.4‬‬ ‫‪RS1‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪D3H‬‬ ‫‪PSW.3‬‬ ‫‪RS0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺟﻴﺴﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ‪٠‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫‪D2H‬‬ ‫‪PSW.2‬‬ ‫‪OV‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪D0H‬‬ ‫‪PSW.0‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪8FH‬‬ ‫‪TCON.7‬‬ ‫‪TF1‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪8EH‬‬ ‫‪TCON.6‬‬ ‫‪TR1‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺳﺮﺭﻳﺰ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪٠‬‬ ‫‪8DH‬‬ ‫‪TCON.5‬‬ ‫‪TF0‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪8CH‬‬ ‫‪TCON.4‬‬ ‫‪TR0‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪8BH‬‬ ‫‪TCON.3‬‬ ‫‪IE1‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪8AH‬‬ ‫‪TCON.2‬‬ ‫‪IT1‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪89H‬‬ ‫‪TCON.1‬‬ ‫‪IE0‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ‪0‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪88H‬‬ ‫‪TCON.0‬‬ ‫‪IT0‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪9FH‬‬ ‫‪SCON.7‬‬ ‫‪SM0‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪9EH‬‬ ‫‪SCON.6‬‬ ‫‪SM1‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪9DH‬‬ ‫‪SCON.5‬‬ ‫‪SM2‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪9CH‬‬ ‫‪SCON.4‬‬ ‫‪REN‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ 8‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪9BH‬‬ ‫‪SCON.3‬‬ ‫‪TB8‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ 8‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪9AH‬‬ ‫‪SCON.2‬‬ ‫‪RB8‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪99H‬‬ ‫‪SCON.1‬‬ ‫‪TI‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪98H‬‬ ‫‪SCON.0‬‬ ‫‪RI‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪AFH‬‬ ‫‪IE.7‬‬ ‫‪EA‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ACH‬‬ ‫‪IE.4‬‬ ‫‪ES‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ABH‬‬ ‫‪IE.3‬‬ ‫‪ETI‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪AAH‬‬

‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪IE.2‬‬ ‫‪EX1‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪A9H‬‬ ‫‪IE.1‬‬ ‫‪ET0‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪A8H‬‬ ‫‪IE.0‬‬ ‫‪EX0‬‬

‫‪tr‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪B7H‬‬ ‫‪P3.7‬‬ ‫‪RD‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪B6H‬‬ ‫‪P3.6‬‬ ‫‪WR‬‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ /‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪B5H‬‬ ‫‪P3.5‬‬ ‫‪T1‬‬

‫‪.C‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ /‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪B4H‬‬ ‫‪P3.4‬‬ ‫‪T0‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪B3H‬‬ ‫‪P3.3‬‬ ‫‪INT1‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪B2H‬‬ ‫‪P3.2‬‬ ‫‪INT0‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪B1H‬‬ ‫‪P3.1‬‬ ‫‪TXD‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪B0H‬‬ ‫‪P3.0‬‬ ‫‪RXD‬‬
‫ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪BCH‬‬ ‫‪IP.4‬‬ ‫‪PS‬‬
‫ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪١‬‬ ‫‪BBH‬‬ ‫‪IP.3‬‬ ‫‪PT1‬‬
‫ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪١‬‬ ‫‪BAH‬‬ ‫‪IP.2‬‬ ‫‪PX1‬‬

‫ﺣﻖ ﺗﻘﺪﻭﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪B9H‬‬ ‫‪IP.1‬‬ ‫‪PT0‬‬
‫ﺣﻖﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪B8H‬‬ ‫‪IP.0‬‬ ‫‪PX0‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ‪89C51‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪lM‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪tr‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪.C‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪w‬‬

Micro-8051-Www ControlMakers Ir

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micro-8051-Www ControlMakers Ir

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮو ﻧﻮآوران ﮐﺎوش‬

‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻁ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﺒﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪+5V‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬

‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0V‬‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺒﻞ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬

‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1010‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬

‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1011‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬

‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1101‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬

‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪1110‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬

‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪1111‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 5D1A‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪: 89C51‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪:٨‬‬

‫‪P1.7‬‬ ‫‪P1.6‬‬ ‫‪P1.5‬‬ ‫‪P1.4‬‬ ‫‪P1.3‬‬ ‫‪P1.2‬‬ ‫‪P1.1‬‬ ‫‪P1.0‬‬

‫‪P3.7‬‬ ‫‪P3.6‬‬ ‫‪P3.5‬‬ ‫‪P3.4‬‬ ‫‪P3.3‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪P3.0‬‬ ‫‪P3.1‬‬ ‫‪P3.2‬‬ ‫‪P3.3‬‬ ‫‪P3.4‬‬ ‫‪P3.5‬‬ ‫‪P3.6‬‬ ‫‪P3.7‬‬

‫‪RXD‬‬ ‫‪TXD‬‬ ‫‪INT0‬‬ ‫‪INT1‬‬ ‫‪T0‬‬ ‫‪T1‬‬ ‫‪WR‬‬ ‫‪RD‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ ٢١‬ﺗﺎ ‪:٢٨‬‬

‫‪P2.7‬‬ ‫‪P2.6‬‬ ‫‪P2.5‬‬ ‫‪P2.4‬‬ ‫‪P2.3‬‬ ‫‪P2.2‬‬ ‫‪P2.1‬‬ ‫‪P2.0‬‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻛﺶ ‪ ARRAY‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪P3.7‬‬ ‫‪P3.6‬‬ ‫‪P3.5‬‬ ‫‪P3.4‬‬ ‫‪P3.3‬‬ ‫‪P3.2‬‬ ‫‪P3.1‬‬ ‫‪P3.0‬‬

‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ reset‬ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Reset‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ Reset‬ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ R1‬ﻭ ‪ C1‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪R2 = 100 Ω‬‬

‫ﻣﺪار ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯿﮑﺮوﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ را ‪ Reset‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ١٨‬ﻭ ‪ ١٩‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪RAM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪8052‬‬ ‫‪256‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪8K‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪128K‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻯ ﺑﺮ‪RAM‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪RAM‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺑﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺏ( ‪ RAM‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺝ( ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪RAM‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺩ( ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬

‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻴﺖ‬

‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪4F‬‬ ‫‪4E‬‬ ‫‪4D‬‬ ‫‪4C‬‬ ‫‪4B‬‬ ‫‪4A‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬

‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬

‫‪1F‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪TMOD‬‬

‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪PCON‬‬

‫‪0F‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪DPH‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ CPU‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪٨٠٥١‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪Assembler‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ EEPROM‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Z = LOOP3 = 10Y‬‬ ‫‪Y = 255 X‬‬